1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1321–1360 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Navy metal carport with white trim sheltering a silver truck and red UTV

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Motorcycle & Toy Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Toy Garage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Reinforced Anchors
  • Walk-In Door
  • Theft Deterrent
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-MOTORCYCLE-TOY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Motorcycle & Toy Garage layout.

Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor pattern keep your toys where you left them.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Toy Garage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Toy Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & toy garage
Everyday motorcycle & toy garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & toy garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Toy Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Toy Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Toy Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Toy Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage cost?

A 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Toy Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy metal carport with white trim sheltering a silver truck and red UTV

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with gray wainscot and roll-up door at mountain sunset

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped. Park two F-150s nose-to-tail with 13 feet left over for a workbench, tool chest, and bike storage. Side-by-side parking works too with a 12-foot or.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 two-car detached garage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped. Park two F-150s nose-to-tail with 13 feet left over for a workbench, tool chest, and bike storage. Side-by-side parking works too with a 12-foot or 16-foot roll-up. Two walk-in doors keep daily traffic off the main bay.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 two-car detached garage cost?

A 20×35 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with gray wainscot and roll-up door at mountain sunset

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown commercial metal building with roll-up door and gooseneck lights in open meadow

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Three-Car Compact Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a.

You’re viewing:Three-Car Compact Garage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 3-Car Capable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-THREE-CAR-COMPACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 three-car compact garage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Three-Car Compact Garage layout.

Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a 20×35 roll-up on each gable for pull-through, or one 16-foot opening for side parking.

💡 Pro tip:Three-Car Compact Garage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Compact Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Compact Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Compact Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car compact garage
Everyday three-car compact garage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car compact garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car compact garage + seasonal storage
three-car compact garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 three-car compact garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Compact Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Compact Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Compact Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Compact Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 three-car compact garage cost?

A 20×35 three-car compact garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 three-car compact garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud three-car compact garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 three-car compact garage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car compact garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 three-car compact garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 three-car compact garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 three-car compact garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 three-car compact garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 three-car compact garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 three-car compact garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 three-car compact garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 three-car compact garage typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Compact Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown commercial metal building with roll-up door and gooseneck lights in open meadow

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy metal garage with two open bays holding an RV and boat among lakeside pines

20×35 RV Cover and Carport

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 RV Cover and Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 RV Cover and Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35RV Cover and Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 RV Cover and Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most rooftop AC units and slide-toppers. Order it open on the gable ends.

You’re viewing:RV Cover and Carport·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12-14 ft Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-RV-COVER-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 rv cover and carport.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

RV Cover and Carport layout.

RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most rooftop AC units and slide-toppers. Order it open on the gable ends, partially enclosed for storage, or fully enclosed as a garage with a 20×35 roll-up.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover and Carport works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 RV Cover and Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover and Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover and Carport spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover and Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover and carport
Everyday rv cover and carport
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover and carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover and carport + seasonal storage
rv cover and carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 RV Cover and Carport, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 rv cover and carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover and Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 RV Cover and Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 RV Cover and Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover and Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover and Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover and Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 rv cover and carport cost?

A 20×35 rv cover and carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 rv cover and carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover and carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 rv cover and carport?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover and carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 rv cover and carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 rv cover and carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 rv cover and carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 rv cover and carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 rv cover and carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 rv cover and carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 rv cover and carport for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover and carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover and Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy metal garage with two open bays holding an RV and boat among lakeside pines

20×35 RV Cover and Carport

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,200

12

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,900$12,200SAVE $1,700
or $254/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Workshop and Detached Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 700 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×35 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt.

You’re viewing:Workshop and Detached Shop·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,200$13,900Save $1,700
or as low as $254/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,300
20×35
this size
$12,200
20×36
longer
$12,500
22×35
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Insulated
  • R-19 Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-WORKSHOP-DETACHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 workshop and detached shop.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Workshop and Detached Shop layout.

Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 700 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×35 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a 36-inch walk-in, and two 20×35 windows for cross-ventilation and natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop and Detached Shop works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop and Detached Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop and Detached Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop and Detached Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop and detached shop
Everyday workshop and detached shop
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and detached shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
workshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$254/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 workshop and detached shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $254/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop and Detached Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop and Detached Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop and Detached Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop and Detached Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 workshop and detached shop cost?

A 20×35 workshop and detached shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $254/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 workshop and detached shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 workshop and detached shop?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 workshop and detached shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 workshop and detached shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 workshop and detached shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $254/month on a 20×35 workshop and detached shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 workshop and detached shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 workshop and detached shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×35 workshop and detached shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop and Detached Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof. The 12-foot leg option clears a Kubota with a front-end loader raised. Open the gable end for.

You’re viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$10,100
20×35
this size
$11,000
20×36
longer
$11,300
22×35
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 35′ · 700 ground + loft

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed layout.

Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof. The 12-foot leg option clears a Kubota with a front-end loader raised. Open the gable end for drive-through access and add a lean-to later for hay storage off one sidewall.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment shed
Everyday hobby farm equipment shed
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed cost?

A 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with tan doors and stacked firewood rack near mountain pines

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Two-Stall Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×35 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle. The vertical roof sheds rain cleanly off the 35-foot run, and 20×35 windows on each stall give airflow. Add a sliding barn door.

You’re viewing:Two-Stall Horse Barn·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$10,100
20×35
this size
$11,000
20×36
longer
$11,300
22×35
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • 2 Stalls + Tack
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-TWO-STALL-HORSE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 two-stall horse barn.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×35 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Two-Stall Horse Barn layout.

Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×35 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle. The vertical roof sheds rain cleanly off the 35-foot run, and 20×35 windows on each stall give airflow. Add a sliding barn door at one gable and Dutch doors on the long wall for direct paddock turnout.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Stall Horse Barn works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Stall Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Stall Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday two-stall horse barn
Everyday two-stall horse barn
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
two-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 two-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Stall Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Stall Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Stall Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 two-stall horse barn cost?

A 20×35 two-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 two-stall horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 two-stall horse barn?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 two-stall horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 two-stall horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 two-stall horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×35 two-stall horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 two-stall horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 two-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 two-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with tan doors and stacked firewood rack near mountain pines

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a grassy pasture

20×35 Storage Building

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

Suburban homeowners who’ve outgrown their 20×35 shed step up to a 20×35 storage building for mowers, snowblowers, kayaks, holiday bins, and patio furniture. Spec one 20×35 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch.

You’re viewing:Storage Building·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 8-10 ft Legs
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • Budget Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 storage building.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Suburban homeowners who’ve outgrown their 20×35 shed step up to a 20×35 storage building for mowers, snowblowers, kayaks, holiday bins, and patio furniture.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft shop

Storage Building layout.

Suburban homeowners who’ve outgrown their 20×35 shed step up to a 20×35 storage building for mowers, snowblowers, kayaks, holiday bins, and patio furniture. Spec one 20×35 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch walk-in for daily access. 14-gauge framing and 29-gauge panels keep the price floor low.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building
Everyday storage building
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building + seasonal storage
storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Storage Building, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 storage building cost?

A 20×35 storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 storage building?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 storage building typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a grassy pasture

20×35 Storage Building

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Man Cave and She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 700 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with.

You’re viewing:Man Cave and She Shed·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 man cave and she shed.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 35′ · 700 ground + loft

Man Cave and She Shed layout.

Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 700 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with cutting tables, shelving, and a reading nook. Insulate with R-13 vapor barrier minimum.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave and She Shed works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave and She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave and She Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave and She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave and she shed
Everyday man cave and she shed
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave and she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave and she shed + seasonal storage
man cave and she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 man cave and she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave and She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave and She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave and She Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave and She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 man cave and she shed cost?

A 20×35 man cave and she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 man cave and she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave and she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 man cave and she shed?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave and she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 man cave and she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 man cave and she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 man cave and she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 man cave and she shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 man cave and she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 man cave and she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 man cave and she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave and she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave and She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport implement shelter at golden hour with a tractor and field cultivator underneath

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud, From $12,200

12

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,900$12,200SAVE $1,700
or $254/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof. The taller 13-foot leg clears box trucks and ladder racks. Spec a 20×35 roll-up at the gable, a slide-bolt walk-in, and.

You’re viewing:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,200$13,900Save $1,700
or as low as $254/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,300
20×35
this size
$12,200
20×36
longer
$12,500
22×35
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Security Bars
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof.

TruckTrailer20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft pass-through

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover layout.

Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof. The taller 13-foot leg clears box trucks and ladder racks. Spec a 20×35 roll-up at the gable, a slide-bolt walk-in, and security bars on the windows for tool theft protection on remote yards.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage and job trailer cover
Everyday contractor storage and job trailer cover
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage and job trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
contractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$254/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $254/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover cost?

A 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $12,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $254/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $254/month on a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport implement shelter at golden hour with a tractor and field cultivator underneath

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Round-Bale and Grain Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners stack roughly 30 round bales, pallets of seed, and a row of grain bins under a 20×35 with a Galvalume bare-metal finish that shrugs off coastal salt air. Spec auger ground anchors for.

You’re viewing:Round-Bale and Grain Storage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$10,100
20×35
this size
$11,000
20×36
longer
$11,300
22×35
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Ground Anchors
  • Grain Bin Framing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-ROUND-BALE-GRAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 round-bale and grain storage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Rural property owners stack roughly 30 round bales, pallets of seed, and a row of grain bins under a 20×35 with a Galvalume bare-metal finish that shrugs off coastal salt air.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft shop

Round-Bale and Grain Storage layout.

Rural property owners stack roughly 30 round bales, pallets of seed, and a row of grain bins under a 20×35 with a Galvalume bare-metal finish that shrugs off coastal salt air. Spec auger ground anchors for direct-on-dirt installs, framed openings for a future overhead conveyor, and 26-gauge panels for hail country. Cheaper per square foot than any pole barn at the same footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Round-Bale and Grain Storage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Round-Bale and Grain Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Round-Bale and Grain Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Round-Bale and Grain Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday round-bale and grain storage
Everyday round-bale and grain storage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a round-bale and grain storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWround-bale and grain storage + seasonal storage
round-bale and grain storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 round-bale and grain storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Round-Bale and Grain Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Round-Bale and Grain Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Round-Bale and Grain Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Round-Bale and Grain Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage cost?

A 20×35 round-bale and grain storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud round-bale and grain storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud round-bale and grain storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Round-Bale and Grain Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal garage with white trim, open bay revealing a backyard workshop and workbench

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,600

12

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,350$12,600SAVE $1,750
or $263/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welders and small fab shops use the 12-foot legs to clear an overhead door track and lift table. 700 sq ft fits a 20×35 plasma cutter, two welding bays, and a parts rack. Spec 26-gauge panels for spark resistance, a.

You’re viewing:Small Fabrication and Welding Shop·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,600$14,350Save $1,750
or as low as $263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,700
20×35
this size
$12,600
20×36
longer
$12,900
22×35
wider
$13,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 26 GA Panels
  • Framed Openings
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-SMALL-FABRICATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Welders and small fab shops use the 12-foot legs to clear an overhead door track and lift table.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop layout.

Welders and small fab shops use the 12-foot legs to clear an overhead door track and lift table. 700 sq ft fits a 20×35 plasma cutter, two welding bays, and a parts rack. Spec 26-gauge panels for spark resistance, a 20×35 roll-up, and framed openings for an exhaust fan and 200-amp electrical.

💡 Pro tip:Small Fabrication and Welding Shop works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Fabrication and Welding Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Fabrication and Welding Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday small fabrication and welding shop
Everyday small fabrication and welding shop
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small fabrication and welding shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall fabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
small fabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$263/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Fabrication and Welding Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Fabrication and Welding Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Fabrication and Welding Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop cost?

A 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small fabrication and welding shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small fabrication and welding shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $263/month on a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Small Fabrication and Welding Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal garage with white trim, open bay revealing a backyard workshop and workbench

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel building with cream trim and open bay storing bass boats by water

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building. The 35-foot length covers the trailer tongue. Order a 20×35 roll-up for the boat, a walk-in on the.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Asphalt Anchors
  • Boat + Toys
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 boat and toy storage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building.

RV BAYDaily Driver20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft · tall walls

Boat and Toy Storage layout.

Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building. The 35-foot length covers the trailer tongue. Order a 20×35 roll-up for the boat, a walk-in on the side for daily access, and asphalt anchors if it sits on a paved pad.

💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 boat and toy storage cost?

A 20×35 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel building with cream trim and open bay storing bass boats by water

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

12

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800
or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×30Mini-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×30 and 100×30 unit.

You’re viewing:Mini-Storage Facility·Size100×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800
or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×30
100×30
this size
$48,550
100×40
longer
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X30-MINI-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×30 mini-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 30 feet long. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 30′ · 3,000 sq ft shop

Mini-Storage Facility layout.

Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×30 and 100×30 unit footprints with a center drive aisle. At 20 units renting for $75 to $100/month each, gross monthly revenue runs $1,500 to $2,000, paying off the building in 24 to 36 months at typical rural occupancy.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Storage Facility works well at 100×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage facility
Everyday mini-storage facility
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage facility + seasonal storage
mini-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×30 mini-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×30?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 30′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×30

Fleet Garage

100×30 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 100×30

Fabrication Shop

100×30 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 100×30

Barndominium Shell

100×30 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 100×30

Equipment Storage Barn

100×30 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 100×30

Auto Repair Shop

100×30 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 100×30

Warehouse

100×30 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 100×30

Horse Barn

100×30 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 100×30

Hobbyist Workshop

100×30 hobbyist workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobbyist Workshop →

🏢 100×30

Commercial Garage

100×30 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 100×30

Hay & Feed Barn

100×30 hay & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Barn →

🎯 100×30

Event & Recreation Space

100×30 event & recreation space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event & Recreation Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×30 mini-storage facility cost?

A 100×30 mini-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×30 mini-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mini-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×30 mini-storage facility?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×30 mini-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×30 mini-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×30 mini-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1011/month on a 100×30 mini-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×30 mini-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×30 mini-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×30 mini-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage with three roll-up doors and a fleet of white cargo vans parked outside

100×30 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×30 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

12

100×30 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800
or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×30Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×30 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×30 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size100×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800
or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×30
100×30
this size
$48,550
100×40
longer
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16′ Legs
  • 8-10 Truck Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X30-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×30 fleet garage.

100 feet wide × 30 feet long. Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 30′ · 3,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage layout.

Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×30 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck pull through. Beats outdoor parking on insurance alone.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage works well at 100×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×30 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×30 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×30 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×30?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 30′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×30 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×30 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 100×30

Mini-Storage Facility

100×30 mini-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mini-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×30

Fabrication Shop

100×30 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 100×30

Barndominium Shell

100×30 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 100×30

Equipment Storage Barn

100×30 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 100×30

Auto Repair Shop

100×30 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 100×30

Warehouse

100×30 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 100×30

Horse Barn

100×30 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 100×30

Hobbyist Workshop

100×30 hobbyist workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobbyist Workshop →

🏢 100×30

Commercial Garage

100×30 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 100×30

Hay & Feed Barn

100×30 hay & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Barn →

🎯 100×30

Event & Recreation Space

100×30 event & recreation space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event & Recreation Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×30 fleet garage cost?

A 100×30 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×30 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×30 fleet garage?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×30 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×30 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×30 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1011/month on a 100×30 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 100×30 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×30 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×30 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage with three roll-up doors and a fleet of white cargo vans parked outside

100×30 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $174,500

12

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$198,950$174,500SAVE $24,450
or $3635/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof. Multiple 100×100 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$174,500$198,950Save $24,450
or as low as $3635/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$164,750
100×100
this size
$174,500
100×110
longer
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $54,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. 10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations layout.

10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof. Multiple 100×100 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3635/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3635/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $174,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3635/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3635/month on a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations typically adds $80,000–$120,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×100 Manufacturing Floor

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Manufacturing Floor | Steel and Stud, From $176,750

12

100×100 Manufacturing Floor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,500$176,750SAVE $24,750
or $3682/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Manufacturing Floor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Manufacturing Floor, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Column-free 10,000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced framing supports rooftop HVAC and rooftop solar arrays without.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Floor·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,750$201,500Save $24,750
or as low as $3682/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$167,000
100×100
this size
$176,750
100×110
longer
$203,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $68,000
  • Crane Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-MANUFACTURING-FLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 manufacturing floor.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free 10,000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Floor layout.

Column-free 10,000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced framing supports rooftop HVAC and rooftop solar arrays without secondary structural work.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Floor works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Manufacturing Floor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Floor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Floor spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Floor.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing floor
Everyday manufacturing floor
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing floor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing floor + seasonal storage
manufacturing floor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Manufacturing Floor, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3682/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 manufacturing floor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3682/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Floor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Manufacturing Floor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Manufacturing Floor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Floor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Floor also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Floor questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 manufacturing floor cost?

A 100×100 manufacturing floor from Steel and Stud starts at $176,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3682/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 manufacturing floor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing floor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 manufacturing floor?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing floor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 manufacturing floor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 manufacturing floor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 manufacturing floor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3682/month on a 100×100 manufacturing floor.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 manufacturing floor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 manufacturing floor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 manufacturing floor handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×100 manufacturing floor ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Floor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×100 Manufacturing Floor

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×100 Distribution Hub

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud, From $176,350

12

100×100 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,050$176,350SAVE $24,700
or $3674/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Distribution Hub

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Distribution Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for high-throughput logistics: dock-leveler-ready openings on the long wall, drive-through bay configurations, and clear height for forklifts to stack pallets four high. Pairs naturally with a side lean-to for.

You’re viewing:Distribution Hub·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,350$201,050Save $24,700
or as low as $3674/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$166,600
100×100
this size
$176,350
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 distribution hub.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Built for high-throughput logistics: dock-leveler-ready openings on the long wall, drive-through bay configurations, and clear height for forklifts to stack pallets four high.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Distribution Hub layout.

Built for high-throughput logistics: dock-leveler-ready openings on the long wall, drive-through bay configurations, and clear height for forklifts to stack pallets four high. Pairs naturally with a side lean-to for trailer staging.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Hub works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Distribution Hub, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3674/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3674/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 distribution hub cost?

A 100×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $176,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3674/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 distribution hub price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 distribution hub?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3674/month on a 100×100 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×100 distribution hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×100 Distribution Hub

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray commercial metal building with four retail storefronts, awnings and stone wainscot at dusk

100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail | Steel and Stud, From $176,350

12

100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,050$176,350SAVE $24,700
or $3674/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Commercial Showroom / Retail

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Auto, RV, boat, or equipment dealership floors that need 10,000 sq ft of column-free display. Storefront glazing, customer-facing finishes, and engineered roof loads for branded signage and HVAC equipment.

You’re viewing:Commercial Showroom / Retail·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,350$201,050Save $24,700
or as low as $3674/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$166,600
100×100
this size
$176,350
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Storefront Glazing
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 commercial showroom / retail.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Auto, RV, boat, or equipment dealership floors that need 10,000 sq ft of column-free display.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Commercial Showroom / Retail layout.

Auto, RV, boat, or equipment dealership floors that need 10,000 sq ft of column-free display. Storefront glazing, customer-facing finishes, and engineered roof loads for branded signage and HVAC equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Showroom / Retail works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom / Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom / Retail spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom / Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom / retail
Everyday commercial showroom / retail
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom / retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3674/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 commercial showroom / retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3674/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom / Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Showroom / Retail · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom / Retail also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom / Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 commercial showroom / retail cost?

A 100×100 commercial showroom / retail from Steel and Stud starts at $176,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3674/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 commercial showroom / retail price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 commercial showroom / retail?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 commercial showroom / retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 commercial showroom / retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 commercial showroom / retail without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3674/month on a 100×100 commercial showroom / retail.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 commercial showroom / retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 commercial showroom / retail in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×100 commercial showroom / retail meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom / Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray commercial metal building with four retail storefronts, awnings and stone wainscot at dusk

100×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan enclosed rv metal cover building with two tall bays storing a motorhome and boat lakeside

100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud, From $176,350

12

100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,050$176,350SAVE $24,700
or $3674/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers, marine boats, and recreational equipment. 18 to 20 feet of leg clearance accommodates the tallest fifth wheels with rooftop AC units.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,350$201,050Save $24,700
or as low as $3674/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$166,600
100×100
this size
$176,350
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $62,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers, marine boats, and recreational equipment.

RV BAYDaily Driver100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft · tall walls

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory layout.

Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers, marine boats, and recreational equipment. 18 to 20 feet of leg clearance accommodates the tallest fifth wheels with rooftop AC units.

💡 Pro tip:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3674/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3674/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $176,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3674/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3674/month on a 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan enclosed rv metal cover building with two tall bays storing a motorhome and boat lakeside

100×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building sports facility with glass entry and parked cars

100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud, From $174,500

12

100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$198,950$174,500SAVE $24,450
or $3635/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

10,000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline run-out, two practice fields for soccer or lacrosse, batting cages with overhead clearance, or a CrossFit-style training floor with rigs along the long.

You’re viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$174,500$198,950Save $24,450
or as low as $3635/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$164,750
100×100
this size
$174,500
100×110
longer
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. 10,000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline run-out, two practice fields for soccer or lacrosse, batting cages with overhead clearance, or a CrossFit-style training floor with rigs along the long wall.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 100′ · 10,000 ground + loft

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports layout.

10,000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline run-out, two practice fields for soccer or lacrosse, batting cages with overhead clearance, or a CrossFit-style training floor with rigs along the long wall.

💡 Pro tip:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3635/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3635/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $174,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3635/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3635/month on a 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building sports facility with glass entry and parked cars

100×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $175,150

12

100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$199,650$175,150SAVE $24,500
or $3649/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Agricultural Processing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hay barn, grain processing, cold storage, dairy operations, or large-equipment housing for combines and grain trucks. Heavy-gauge framing supports rooftop conveyors, ventilation fans, and industrial wash-down systems.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$175,150$199,650Save $24,500
or as low as $3649/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$165,400
100×100
this size
$175,150
100×110
longer
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 agricultural processing facility.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Hay barn, grain processing, cold storage, dairy operations, or large-equipment housing for combines and grain trucks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Agricultural Processing Facility layout.

Hay barn, grain processing, cold storage, dairy operations, or large-equipment housing for combines and grain trucks. Heavy-gauge framing supports rooftop conveyors, ventilation fans, and industrial wash-down systems.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Processing Facility works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3649/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3649/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 100×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $175,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3649/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3649/month on a 100×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$175,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$175,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure fleet garage at misty dawn with white vans staged on wet pavement

100×100 Trucking Terminal

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud, From $176,350

12

100×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,050$176,350SAVE $24,700
or $3674/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Trucking Terminal

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Trucking Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Mid-size cross-dock terminal with bay doors on opposing long walls, dock-leveler-ready openings, and clear interior height for tractor-trailers to drive through fully loaded. Office partition fits naturally on the.

You’re viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,350$201,050Save $24,700
or as low as $3674/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$166,600
100×100
this size
$176,350
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $62,000
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 trucking terminal.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Mid-size cross-dock terminal with bay doors on opposing long walls, dock-leveler-ready openings, and clear interior height for tractor-trailers to drive through fully loaded.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Trucking Terminal layout.

Mid-size cross-dock terminal with bay doors on opposing long walls, dock-leveler-ready openings, and clear interior height for tractor-trailers to drive through fully loaded. Office partition fits naturally on the front-end gable.

💡 Pro tip:Trucking Terminal works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Trucking Terminal, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3674/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3674/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 100×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $176,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3674/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3674/month on a 100×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×100 trucking terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure fleet garage at misty dawn with white vans staged on wet pavement

100×100 Trucking Terminal

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $176,750

12

100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,500$176,750SAVE $24,750
or $3682/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Warehouse / Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

10,000 sq ft of high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk storage, or inventory staging. Standard 18-foot clearance supports four-tier racking; 20-foot clearance accommodates five-tier with forklift access.

You’re viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,750$201,500Save $24,750
or as low as $3682/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$167,000
100×100
this size
$176,750
100×110
longer
$203,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Code Certified
  • Rack Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. 10,000 sq ft of high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk storage, or inventory staging.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Warehouse / Inventory Storage layout.

10,000 sq ft of high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk storage, or inventory staging. Standard 18-foot clearance supports four-tier racking; 20-foot clearance accommodates five-tier with forklift access.

💡 Pro tip:Warehouse / Inventory Storage works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3682/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3682/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $176,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3682/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3682/month on a 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×100 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage in winter with a snowplow truck inside and salt spreader truck outside

100×100 Municipal / Government Facility

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Municipal / Government Facility | Steel and Stud, From $176,450

12

100×100 Municipal / Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,150$176,450SAVE $24,700
or $3676/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Municipal / Government Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Municipal / Government Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Public works storage, emergency response staging, regional evacuation shelters, or municipal equipment yards. Engineered to 170+ MPH wind ratings with stamped plans suitable for FEMA shelter compliance and public-bid.

You’re viewing:Municipal / Government Facility·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,450$201,150Save $24,700
or as low as $3676/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$166,700
100×100
this size
$176,450
100×110
longer
$203,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • FEMA Compliant
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 municipal / government facility.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Public works storage, emergency response staging, regional evacuation shelters, or municipal equipment yards.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Municipal / Government Facility layout.

Public works storage, emergency response staging, regional evacuation shelters, or municipal equipment yards. Engineered to 170+ MPH wind ratings with stamped plans suitable for FEMA shelter compliance and public-bid procurement.

💡 Pro tip:Municipal / Government Facility works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Municipal / Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government facility
Everyday municipal / government facility
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government facility + seasonal storage
municipal / government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Municipal / Government Facility, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3676/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 municipal / government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3676/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Municipal / Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Municipal / Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Facility also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 municipal / government facility cost?

A 100×100 municipal / government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $176,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3676/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 municipal / government facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud municipal / government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 municipal / government facility?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 municipal / government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 municipal / government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 municipal / government facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3676/month on a 100×100 municipal / government facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 municipal / government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 municipal / government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 municipal / government facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage in winter with a snowplow truck inside and salt spreader truck outside

100×100 Municipal / Government Facility

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

100×100 Indoor Riding Arena

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $175,150

12

100×100 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$199,650$175,150SAVE $24,500
or $3649/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Full-size indoor riding ring with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$175,150$199,650Save $24,500
or as low as $3649/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$165,400
100×100
this size
$175,150
100×110
longer
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Kickwall Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 indoor riding arena.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Full-size indoor riding ring with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Indoor Riding Arena layout.

Full-size indoor riding ring with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Riding Arena works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3649/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3649/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×100 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $175,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3649/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3649/month on a 100×100 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$175,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

100×100 Indoor Riding Arena

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$175,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building event hall with tall windows and lantern sconces on a landscaped plaza

100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud, From $176,450

12

100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,150$176,450SAVE $24,700
or $3676/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

10,000 sq ft column-free interior seats 800 to 1,200 in standard worship configuration, with room for a stage, balcony framing, and rear fellowship space. Insulation packages and HVAC-ready framing handle congregation.

You’re viewing:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,450$201,150Save $24,700
or as low as $3676/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$166,700
100×100
this size
$176,450
100×110
longer
$203,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. 10,000 sq ft column-free interior seats 800 to 1,200 in standard worship configuration, with room for a stage, balcony framing, and rear fellowship space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall layout.

10,000 sq ft column-free interior seats 800 to 1,200 in standard worship configuration, with room for a stage, balcony framing, and rear fellowship space. Insulation packages and HVAC-ready framing handle congregation comfort year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center / fellowship hall
Everyday worship center / fellowship hall
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3676/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3676/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall cost?

A 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $176,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3676/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3676/month on a 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 worship center / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building event hall with tall windows and lantern sconces on a landscaped plaza

100×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

100×110 Distribution Warehouse

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Distribution Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×110 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile.

You’re viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 distribution warehouse.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 100×110 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Distribution Warehouse layout.

Our 100×110 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically. Add three dock-high roll-ups on the long wall for staged loading.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Warehouse works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×110 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 distribution warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

100×110 Distribution Warehouse

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×110 Manufacturing Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $203,600

12

100×110 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$232,100$203,600SAVE $28,500
or $4242/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×110 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,600$232,100Save $28,500
or as low as $4242/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,750
100×110
this size
$203,600
100×120
longer
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Crane-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 manufacturing facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Facility layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×110 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof. The clear-span design means no interior columns interrupting overhead crane runways. Spec 12-gauge framing and 26-gauge walls for the heavier internal loads.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Facility works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4242/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4242/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×110 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $203,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4242/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4242/month on a 100×110 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×110 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×110 Manufacturing Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal workshop with white roll-up door and skylights set among mountain pines

100×110 Commercial Workshop

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×110 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 commercial workshop.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Commercial Workshop layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×110 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a proven layout for leasing to auto repair, welding, woodworking, and small fab shops. Pre-frame the partitions in the 3D builder so you can drop steel-stud walls later.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Workshop works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×110 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal workshop with white roll-up door and skylights set among mountain pines

100×110 Commercial Workshop

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white trim, twin cupolas and open hay bay on a sunset farmstead

100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $202,000

12

100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Equipment & Hay Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×110 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Agricultural-industrial operators use this size to shelter combines.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$175,150
100×110
this size
$202,000
100×120
longer
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 equipment & hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 100×110 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Equipment & Hay Barn layout.

Our 100×110 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Agricultural-industrial operators use this size to shelter combines, sprayers, and 1,000+ round bales in one structure. The 100-foot width clears two equipment lanes back-to-back, and an open gable end on the short wall lets you drive straight through. Add a 100×110 lean-to for tractors.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Hay Barn works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×110 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white trim, twin cupolas and open hay bay on a sunset farmstead

100×110 Equipment & Hay Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×110 Aircraft Hangar

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24′ Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 110′ · 11,000 ground + loft

Aircraft Hangar layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation wingspan, and a hydraulic bifold door across the gable end gives you full clearance. Engineering for FAA wind exposure and tail clearance is built into the stamped drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Aircraft Hangar works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×110 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×110 Aircraft Hangar

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

100×110 Cold Storage Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $203,600

12

100×110 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$232,100$203,600SAVE $28,500
or $4242/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Cold Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×110 cold storage facility packs 11000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,600$232,100Save $28,500
or as low as $4242/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,750
100×110
this size
$203,600
100×120
longer
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 cold storage facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×110 cold storage facility packs 11000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Facility layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×110 cold storage facility packs 11000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage. The 12,11000 sq ft floor splits into a 36°F cooler and a -10°F freezer with a shared loading vestibule. R-30+ panels and vapor-sealed seams are configured during the customize step.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Facility works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Cold Storage Facility, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4242/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4242/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×110 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $203,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4242/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 cold storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4242/month on a 100×110 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×110 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

100×110 Cold Storage Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $201,350

12

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$229,550$201,350SAVE $28,200
or $4195/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 100×110 indoor riding arena fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Equestrian operators choose 100×110 for a full dressage court (66’x132′ fits.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$201,350$229,550Save $28,200
or as low as $4195/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$174,500
100×110
this size
$201,350
100×120
longer
$219,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Clear Span
  • Kick-Wall Wainscot
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 indoor riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 100×110 indoor riding arena fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 110′ · 11,000 ground + loft

Indoor Riding Arena layout.

Our 100×110 indoor riding arena fits 100-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Equestrian operators choose 100×110 for a full dressage court (66’x132′ fits with safe wall clearance trimmed) or a barrel-racing pattern. The clear-span eliminates interior posts that spook horses, and 16-foot eaves give you working clearance for a mounted rider plus roof framing.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Riding Arena works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4195/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4195/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $201,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4195/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4195/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×110 indoor riding arena for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor riding arena to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$201,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$201,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building retail showroom interior with wood shelving, housewares displays, and browsing shoppers

100×110 Retail & Showroom

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Retail & Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service.

You’re viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 retail & showroom.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Retail & Showroom layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×110 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Retail & Showroom works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Retail & Showroom, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×110 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 retail & showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building retail showroom interior with wood shelving, housewares displays, and browsing shoppers

100×110 Retail & Showroom

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal carport with open sides sheltering an RV, truck, boat and tractor by pine hills

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud, From $203,600

12

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$232,100$203,600SAVE $28,500
or $4242/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Truck & Fleet Service Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec 100×110 roll-ups on both long walls for true.

You’re viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,600$232,100Save $28,500
or as low as $4242/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,750
100×110
this size
$203,600
100×120
longer
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 truck & fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Truck & Fleet Service Center layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec 100×110 roll-ups on both long walls for true drive-through service.

💡 Pro tip:Truck & Fleet Service Center works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4242/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4242/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×110 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $203,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4242/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4242/month on a 100×110 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×110 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal carport with open sides sheltering an RV, truck, boat and tractor by pine hills

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building garage with two black doors, sports car, and ATV parked outside

100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud, From $203,300

12

100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,750$203,300SAVE $28,450
or $4235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Sports & Recreation Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 100×110 sports & recreation facility? At 11000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages.

You’re viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,300$231,750Save $28,450
or as low as $4235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,450
100×110
this size
$203,300
100×120
longer
$221,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 sports & recreation facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Looking for a 100×110 sports & recreation facility? At 11000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Sports & Recreation Facility layout.

Looking for a 100×110 sports & recreation facility? At 11000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,11000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area. 24-foot eaves clear lobbed shots and ceiling lighting.

💡 Pro tip:Sports & Recreation Facility works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×110 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $203,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4235/month on a 100×110 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building garage with two black doors, sports car, and ATV parked outside

100×110 Sports & Recreation Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal carport style loafing shelter with black trim by a mountain lake

100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud, From $202,000

12

100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Livestock & Dairy Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of rugged livestock & dairy building space. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×110 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open.

You’re viewing:Livestock & Dairy Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$175,150
100×110
this size
$202,000
100×120
longer
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Concrete Kneewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 livestock & dairy building.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of rugged livestock & dairy building space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Livestock & Dairy Building layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of rugged livestock & dairy building space. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×110 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec’d in the customize step, and concrete kneewalls with steel above protect the lower panels.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock & Dairy Building works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock & Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock & dairy building
Everyday livestock & dairy building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock & Dairy Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock & Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock & Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 livestock & dairy building cost?

A 100×110 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 livestock & dairy building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 livestock & dairy building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 livestock & dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 livestock & dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 livestock & dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 livestock & dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal carport style loafing shelter with black trim by a mountain lake

100×110 Livestock & Dairy Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel structure self storage building with row of orange roll-up unit doors

100×110 Self-Storage Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 self-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Facility layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix. Lower eaves keep the heated/cooled volume manageable for HVAC.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Facility works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×110 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel structure self storage building with row of orange roll-up unit doors

100×110 Self-Storage Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building storage units at sunset with cargo van and open door

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $75,050

12

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×40Mini-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 100×40 mini-storage facility? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into.

You’re viewing:Mini-Storage Facility·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×30
smaller
$48,550
100×40
this size
$75,050
100×50
longer
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-MINI-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×40 mini-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 100×40 mini-storage facility? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft shop

Mini-Storage Facility layout.

Looking for a 100×40 mini-storage facility? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×40 and 100×40 unit footprints with a center drive aisle. At 20 units renting for $75 to $100/month each, gross monthly revenue runs $1,500 to $2,000, paying off the building in 24 to 36 months at typical rural occupancy.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Storage Facility works well at 100×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Mini-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage facility
Everyday mini-storage facility
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage facility + seasonal storage
mini-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 mini-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Mini-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×40

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×40 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×40

Barndominium

100×40 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 mini-storage facility cost?

A 100×40 mini-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 mini-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mini-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 mini-storage facility?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 mini-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 mini-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 mini-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 100×40 mini-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 mini-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 mini-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×40 mini-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building storage units at sunset with cargo van and open door

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart